Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. 1 . You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.Introduction In this tutorial. Finally.

2 .

and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and plumbing engineering workflows. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. 3 . Germany. fixtures. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and plumbing fixtures. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. and piping. electrical. such as duct. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. Add basic MEP elements.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. Add more detailed modelling elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. electrical panels. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. such as mechanical equipment. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials.

it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. On the Contents tab. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. So. Contact your CAD manager for more information. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. such as templates and families. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. as well as how to open and save them. and sheets to document the project. For example. Create schedules. Metric: files for users working with metric units. when you add ductwork. For example. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. you learn where the training files are located. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. In this exercise. When you install the training files as instructed. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. and tags. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you can choose to save your work. templates. annotations. Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. However. to provide a richer and more finished design. however. your Training folder may be in a different location. is located and accessed in the training files location. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. You do not design entire systems. Metric file names have an _m suffix. views. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. NOTE Depending on your installation. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. After completing each exercise. Create detail views. When you open a training file.

if you open settings. and click Save. 3 In the right pane.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. and click the Training Files icon. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name.rvt) is selected. click ➤ Save As. scroll down. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. Accessing Training Files | 5 . verify that Project Files (*. and click Open. enter the new file name.rvt. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. You may close the file with or without saving changes. a list of file types displays. 8 If you have made changes. 4 Click the training file name. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select the folder in which to save the new file.rvt and make changes. the Open dialog displays. For Files of type. double-click Imperial or Metric. For example. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For File name. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. you are prompted to save the changes. and you can open any supported file type.

6 .

you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If the length of the elevation is changed. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the floor or roof remains connected. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. You learn the terminology. the parameter is one of association or connection. If you move the partition. every drawing sheet. quantities. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. scope. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. the operation of the software is parametric. the door retains this relationship to the partition. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. and schedules required for a building project. ■ ■ 7 . The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. hence. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. drawing sheets. In this case. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. schedules. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. drawings. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. In this case. and plans. 2D and 3D view. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. and phases when you need it. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. sections. the hierarchy of elements. As you work in drawing and schedule views. In the Revit MEP model.

and keynotes are annotation elements. Examples include detail lines. They help to describe or document the design. walls and ceilings are hosts. sprinklers. For example. and electrical panels. dimensions. ducts. They display in relevant views of the design. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. For example. boilers. sinks. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. dimensions. Datum elements help to define project context. boilers. and 2D detail components. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The second is its approach to propagating building changes. ducts. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. For example. For example. When you change something. grids. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. and electrical panels. sprinklers. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. tags. filled regions. levels. For example. For example. sinks. tags.

views of the project. However. Project: In Revit MEP. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. If you can draw. and so forth). you must be in a section or elevation view. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. schedules. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals.This implementation provides flexibility for designers. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. For example. The project file contains all information for the building design. Often. section views. North . To place levels. from geometry to construction data. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. floors. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. This information includes components used to design the model. and ceilings. such as roofs. families. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. By using a single project file. you do nothing to establish these relationships. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. elevation views. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. and types. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . programming is not required. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. first floor. Most often. you can explicitly control them. and drawings of the design. for example. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. In other cases. top of wall. or bottom of foundation. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model.

■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. each in-place family contains only a single type. With a few clicks. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. and similar graphical representation. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. A type can be a specific size of a family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. pipes. hiding. For example. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. Then experiment with them. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. For example. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Type: Each family can have several types. such as a 30” X 42” title block.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. identical use. System families can be transferred between projects. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. A type can also be a style. You can also display several project views at one time. and wires. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. System families include ducts. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Unlike system and standard component families. For example. showing. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. or layer the views to see only the one on top. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. However. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project.

2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. To return the panel to the ribbon. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.

select the tool first. tools used for editing existing elements.. tools used for running analysis on the current design. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. and CAD files.. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. then select what you want to modify. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. When working on the Modify tab. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. data and systems.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. project and system parameters. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. architect-specific tools. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. and for switching views. and settings.

a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. when adding duct. provides requested information. application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. For example. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. provides access to common tools. By default. closes the application menu (double-click). a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. displays frequently used tools.

Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. such as Export and Publish. (Save As) export the current drawing.. (Open) save the current drawing...The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. click. (Export) On the application menu. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. select a file to open. select a template and create a new drawing. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Publish) print the current drawing. (Licensing) close the file. saves a current project.On the application menu. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. or template file. but is not enabled by default. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. Camera. (Print) access product and license information. and Walkthrough. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. family.. publish the current project. annotation. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. click. to... annotation. provides views including Default 3D. family. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. or template file.

Starting with the most recent command. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). When you are using a command.To undo or redo a series of operations. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Clear the Status Bar check mark. To hide the Status Bar. Clipboard. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. To show the Status Bar again. When you are highlighting an element or component. workshared components. This displays the command history in a list. when you switch to another editing mode. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. In addition. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. displaying the same information. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. or the Family Editor. Group. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. However. check the Status Bar. repeat the command. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Modify.

Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. To change existing elements to a different type. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add.To cancel or exit the current command. select one or more elements of the same category. including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . click (Modify). View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. for example. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. When you place an element in a drawing. Place a Wall. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar.

(The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. Zoom the view In the tutorials. 1 Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. There are several ways to access zoom options. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.rvt. In the following steps. After you are familiar with these tasks.

Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. Modifying the View | 19 . To modify or add snap increments. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. click . When you release the mouse button. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. NOTE As you zoom in and out. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. In the drawing area. on the Navigation bar. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. If you do not have a wheel mouse. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). this is referred to as a crossing selection. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. the view zooms in on the selected area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. 9 To display SteeringWheels. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. 6 Click in the drawing area.

20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. To define settings for SteeringWheels. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. For more information about SteeringWheels. click the SteeringWheels tab. As you move the mouse. ➤ Options. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. press ESC. 14 To exit the wheel. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. and then using the Zoom tool again. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. bottoms. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. and select the duct.Design. display along the ends. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. After you are familiar with these tasks. Small blue dots. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view. called drag controls. and open Level 2 . 2 Enter ZR. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. These are the drag controls. as shown. Similar controls.

In this example. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. 6 On the Undo menu. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. on the Standard toolbar. Move. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. or press CTRL+Z. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. select the first item in the list. click the Undo command. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .3 Click and drag the bottom control. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. All changes you make to a project are tracked.

for example.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. such as Move and Copy. In this case. require 2 clicks to complete the command. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. After selecting the element to move. as shown. Some commands. and drag it to the left as shown. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . The duct is moved to the new position. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. 11 With the duct already selected. click to specify the starting position. and click again to specify the ending position. you want to move the duct.

13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. For example. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Press ESC twice.End a command Some commands. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 14 Enter VG. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical . Select Mechanical . Notice that the return air duct is not displayed.Supply. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. such as the Modify Ducts command. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct.Return. Click OK.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

and loadable families. and geometry from the starting template. New projects inherit all the families. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. system families. 27 . You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. settings. use copy/monitor. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You can either select a template from the template library. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. the default building levels and standard views. 6 Click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as the default project units and settings. and click Open. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. select Project. link files. such as coordination review and interference checking. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. and modify system settings. you learn how to start a project from a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. Finally. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. 5 In the New Project dialog. click Training files. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. under Create new. such as ducts and pipes. create and manage views. You can choose from several templates. under Template file.rte template. In that case. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. click Browse.

14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information.rte template and click Open. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . navigate to Imperial Templates. 8 In the drawing area. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the default. For example. ■ ■ Under Create new. select Project template. review the construction materials listed. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. and open North. under Energy Analysis. for City. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click (Browse). (Browse). click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. for Energy Data. click Browse. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 10 Using the same method.7 In the Project Browser. In the Choose Template dialog. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. When you select the material. you can select it now. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. create another new project using the Construction template. select School or University. Click OK. For Location. select Level 1. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. click Edit. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. ■ For Building Construction. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select Manchester. Click OK twice. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Click Cancel. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. NH. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.

For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. power distribution systems. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Views. 4 1/2". clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. and fire protection systems. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family.rfa and click Open. 4 1/2". under Pipe Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 24 In the right pane. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. 33 Click OK. 27 Click OK. 5 1/2".19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. For Categories. click Rectangular. 25 In the left pane. for 3 1/2". Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. and demand factors for electrical systems. 23 In the left pane. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. piping. Click OK twice. click Wiring. click Round. under Duct Settings. select Identity Data. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. and 5 1/2". Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project. for 3 1/2". plumbing. click Sizes. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Holding CTRL. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. under Duct Settings. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. wiring. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 22 In the right pane. 10 1/2". for 3/4". 26 In the right pane. and 12 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. 11 1/2".

under Template file. Click Open. For Sort by. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. select Auto . From the Positioning list. and groups that are contained in a project. select View Name. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. For Then by. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. select Project. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. For Then by. sheets. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. Notice that the file is saved as a template. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. select Associated Level. select Sub-Discipline.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. 5 Click OK. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. 4 In the New Project dialog. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. In addition. families. click Training.Origin to Origin. 38 Close the file. Linking Projects In this exercise. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. under Create new. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. 2 In the New Project dialog. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. To enable this coordination. Select Ascending Click OK twice. select Family and Type. click Browse. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. you link the architectural model with the MEP model.rvt. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . TIP You may want to create a new folder first. or families. templates.11 In the Places dialog. and click Open. click My Library. and Import dialogs. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Save. 15 Under Library Name. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. and click (Browse). click (Add Value). 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. ➤ Open. and click OK twice. click the My Library icon. Load. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and select it as the library path. and change the name to My Library.

Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. such as bump maps. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. This path is determined during installation. 3 Under Settings. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. select Ignore words in uppercase. 12 Create a new project using the default template. click Edit. click Places. 9 In the text editor. 27 Click OK. 20 Click ➤ Options. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. If you want to relocate this path. If you work in a large office. click the Spelling tab. and decal image files. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. (Remove Value) to delete the library. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. specify the new location here. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 2 In the Options dialog. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 21 On the File Locations tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. click Edit. 23 Click 24 Click OK. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. custom color files. 5 In the text editor. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 14 Click in the drawing area. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. view the current path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 22 Select My Library. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. click OK.

and enter 1 . under Template file. click Restore Defaults. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. click File menu ➤ Save.17 In the Spelling dialog. click Training Files. 22 In the text editor. You can turn snap settings on and off. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. click Close. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 2 In the New Project dialog. click OK. 24 In the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 23 In the text editor. 20 Under Settings. you modify snap increments. click Browse. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. work with snapping turned off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. under Dimension Snaps. 21 Under Personal dictionary.. In this exercise. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 19 In the Options dialog. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click OK. 25 Close the file without saving it. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Edit. delete sheetmtl-CU. you modify snap settings. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 6 In the Snaps dialog. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 18 Click ➤ Options. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file.

snapping reverts to the system default settings. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. use the wheel button on your mouse. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. zoom out until it does so. enter SM. such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. This is the increment that you added previously. If you do not have a wheel button. 8 In the Snaps dialog. click OK. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. If it does not.7 Under Object Snaps. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. TIP To zoom while sketching. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. 10 On the Options Bar. deselect Chain. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. While sketching. For example. and move the cursor to the right. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right.

the command is only active for one click of the mouse. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 26 Close the file. the midpoint. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. If you move the cursor along the wall.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and specify the wall endpoint. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. with or without saving it. and the wall edges. and move the cursor to the right. Do not set the wall end point. 19 Enter SM. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 22 Move the cursor downward. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. and delete the value 1’ . it will snap to the endpoints.. 25 Click OK. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall.

43 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems. You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system.Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial.

44 .

you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. water source heat pump (WSHP). you can choose to save your work.autodesk. In this lesson. At the end of the tutorial. In this exercise. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you design a mechanical system for an office building. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. duct system and a hydronic piping system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you first plan the system. you first configure the linked architectural model. If the tutorial training files are not present. and then you create a plenum level. go to http://www. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 45 . After finishing each exercise. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. After applying a color scheme to the zones.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you will understand the process. As you create the mechanical system.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. However. By following the recommended workflow. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. This system consists of a cooling tower. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed.

These components are defined in the architectural training file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Next. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it. NOTE When working with a linked file. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. In this section. select Room Bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. ceilings. and after the linked model highlights. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. not in the MEP training file. roof. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and click OK. under Constraints. you add a level for plenums.

7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. The new level is placed. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 9 On the Draw panel. Preparing Spaces | 47 . A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.6 In the Project Browser. and in the Plan View Types dialog. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). and double-click West . Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. and click OK. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. For Offset.MEP. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). Verify that Make Plan View is selected. Click Plan View Types. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and enter Level 2 Plenum. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 8'. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 16 Press Esc. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level).

you can choose to save your work. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. select MEP . for View Range. For Cut plane. and then place spaces in various types of areas. and click Apply Default View Template. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. enter 0. Under Extents. In this exercise.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. Under View Depth. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. ■ Click OK twice. NOTE After finishing each exercise. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. for Top. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. For View Classification.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. for Default View Template. select Level Above (Level 3). you place spaces in areas of the building model. Under Identity Data. select Plenum Plan. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. enter an Offset of 1' 0". This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. For Sub-Discipline.Plenum. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. right-click Level 2 Plenum. 20 In the Project Browser. select Design. However. and click Properties. In the next exercise. click Edit. for View Scale. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. for Level. In this exercise. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select New. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. walls. and ceilings).rvt. enter 0. For Offset. click Training Files. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. Placing Spaces | 49 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool.Space Plan is highlighted. select Horizontal. For (Tag Location). For Space. For Upper Limit. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. select Level 2 Plenum. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor.

8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 219. For Name. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . for Number. 9 Select the space.7 Click to place the space. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 14 In the drawing area. Click OK. enter Library. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ensuring coordination between the files.

enter 0. Placing Spaces | 51 . 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. For Offset. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. For Upper Limit. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 21 Using the method learned previously. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. select Level 3. and then click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. under Energy Analysis. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. and then split the space using a space separation line. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise.

for Upper Limit. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. indicating that it’s the active view. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 .rvt. and then press Esc. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and for Offset. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan is highlighted. enter 0.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select Level 3. click Training Files. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. as shown. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. the plan view would have updated with the changes. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. 11 Close the schedule view. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and press Enter. which was numbered 219Q. enter Corridor. 9 In the floor plan. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. In the schedule. 10 Using the same method. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. double-click the space name.7 In the Project Browser. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. change the space number to 216A.

with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. place a space in the lower area of the split space. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 18 Close the file with or without saving it. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.15 Press Esc twice. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. 16 Using the method learned previously.

2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .rvt. you place a space in a chase. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. click Training Files. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Space Plan is highlighted. If necessary. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

■ ■ 14 Click OK. select Interior and Reference. For Limit Offset. for Upper Limit. enter 225PC. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. right-click. enter 4'. Under Identity Data. expand Spaces. 6 Enter VG. click in the chase area to place the space. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. for Name. select Roof Level. In the plan view. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. for Upper Limit. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . On the Options Bar. For Offset. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. 12 Click in the section view. select the space. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. select Level 3. For Number. enter 0. 10 In the plan view. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog.4 Press Esc. and then click OK. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. and click Element Properties. enter Chase.

and maximize the view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. All spaces in the view are tagged. ceilings.Space Plan. under Loaded Tags. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and you placed spaces for various types of areas. floors. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 17 Type ZF.Bounding elements (such as walls. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. select Space Tag With Volume. and click OK. 15 Press Esc.

The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. After a space is placed in an area. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. To display space reference lines.rvt. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. indicating that it’s the active view. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . you view and verify zones in the System Browser. click Training Files. it is automatically added to the Default zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Notice that Default is currently the only zone.Zoning is highlighted. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. which removes the space from the Default zone. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click in the System Browser.

click Training Files. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. and Electrical 220 spaces. 4 In the drawing area. and a new zone is created. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As you do this. select Computer Lab 222. 7 Close the file with or without saving it.5 In the System Browser. and click OK. select Occupiable. To display space reference lines. Instruction 221. under Spaces. The graphic in the System Browser updates.rvt. you can add or remove a space from the zone. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. The Zone tool is active. and modify the zone properties. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Using the Edit Zone tab. you assign spaces to zones in the building. under Energy Analysis. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Zoning is highlighted. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. Next. the Edit Zone tab displays. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click Reference. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and verify the zones in the System Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. you assign spaces to a zone. indicating that the space is occupiable. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and click Finish Editing Zone.

Expand HVAC Zones. select HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . Click OK. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility.In the System Browser. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. 5 With the drawing area active. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. type VG. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). To view the zone in the drawing area. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). Instruction.

rvt. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.West . click Reference. click Finish Editing Zone. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. click Training Files. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. expand 2 . verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . To display space reference lines. enter 2 . under Spaces. 9 In the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 11 Close the System Browser. Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog.West .Zoning. indicating that it’s the active view. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Zoning is highlighted. for Name. under Identity Data. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise.Area B. and click OK. In this exercise.

and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view to activate it. 8 In the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.Zoning view. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 .5 Click in the Level 1 . 15 Press Esc. zoom out. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 10 Click Finish Editing Zone.Zoning floor plan. Select Attached End. Verify that the distance is 1/2".

for Name Value. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. and zone information. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click the corner where the Top. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .rvt.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. enter Lounge . double-click the zone tag. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Zoning view. double-click Level 1 . and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. on the ViewCube. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. The new zone name displays in the System Browser. you verify the building.East. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. click Training Files.Zoning to make it the active view. Front. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building.

■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. verify that Wireframe is selected. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . With 109 Lounge selected. click (Isolate). and select 109 Lounge. Next.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. you isolate the space. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Click (Highlight). You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. Using the Highlight tool. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.

verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and in the Space Type Settings dialog. select 109 Lounge. click . you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. and then click OK. This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space.■ On the Details tab. For Electrical Loads. ■ ■ ■ Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. and in the People dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. click . and click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. For Construction Type. select 1_South_Lounge. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. and then click OK. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. select Lounge/Recreation. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. scroll down in the left pane. Below the list of spaces and zones. verify that <Building> is selected. click . and in the Electrical Loads dialog. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Next. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. For People.

For Cooling Information. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . heating air temperature. and dehumidification set point. floors. outdoor air per area. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. verify that 74.00 °F : N/A is specified. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. 12 Using the methods learned previously. Next. and other room-bounding components. the zone information displays for the selected zone. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. For Heating Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. Below the list of spaces and zones.00 °F : 90. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. This indicates the heating set point. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. This indicates the cooling set point. and humidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge.00 °F : 54. click (Shading). and air changes per hour. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that 70. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. This indicates the outdoor air per person. roofs.00 °F : N/A is specified. cooling air temperature.

Under Energy Analysis. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). open MEP . 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. Because this is an unoccupied space. select Plenum. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. For Offset. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. select Level 3. select Plenum. 15 In the Project Browser. Under Energy Analysis. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned. enter 0. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. For Name. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. Click OK.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. click Cancel. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. for Number. enter 212P.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and verify that the space has replaced the void. is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you verified building.Space Plan. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. On the Place tab. enter 03101. select School or University. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. click in the Value field. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. for Energy Data. under Energy Analysis. verify that Manchester. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. for City. click Edit. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. space. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . NH. For Postal Code. In this exercise. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. and select space Plenum 212P.rvt. click Training Files.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. and zone information. For Location. double-click Level 2 .

and click OK. select Heated and cooled. you need to select this option. For Latent. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Specified. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. 8 In the drawing area. both.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Building Construction. verify that 1' 0" is specified. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ On the Weather tab. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. If. select Specified. ft. For Condition Type. and then click . right-click. Select Area per person. verify that Level 1 is selected. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. For Space Type. For Ground Plane. a cooling load. select space Library 219. and enter 50 sq. For Project Phase. select Library . and click Element Properties. and click OK. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. for Building Service. verify that New Construction is selected. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. enter 150 Btu/h. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. or neither. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. under Volume Computations. enter 200 Btu/h. For People. Under Heat Gain (per Person). 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis.Audio Visual. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. For Export Complexity. for Values. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Sliver Space Tolerance. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. Click OK twice. this option adjusts the times automatically. click Edit. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. In order to select a space. click in the Value column. For Sensible. for Values. and click OK.

Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . and can be modified here. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. Under Power. and click to learn the cause for the warning. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. click Calculate. You should correct the space error in the building model. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. and under Heating Information. select Actual. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Location. Select the space associated with the warning. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. click Information). See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). select 219 Library. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. select Actual. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. for Values. Click OK twice. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. For Building Service. and click OK. There should be no warnings displayed. 12 Click the Details tab. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. NH. verify that School or University is selected. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Electrical Loads. for Values. verify that Manchester.■ ■ ■ Click OK. For Building Construction. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. click Edit. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. You have verified the building information. is specified.

After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. For Color Scheme. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. space. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 19 In the drawing area. weather. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Training Files. under Energy Analysis. select HVAC Zones. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 16 After you review the loads report. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. and a loads report displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.rvt. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 21 Click OK. 15 Review the loads report for project. select 219 Library. click to the right of the building to place the legend. Click OK. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 3 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. space. or zone information. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. and zone information for the building model. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 17 In the loads report. or make any changes to the model.

Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area.5 Zoom in to the legend. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Tonnage Range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. in 1-ton increments. The new scheme displays in the view. select the color scheme legend. under Schemes. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. and click OK.

The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. 11 Using the method learned previously.

Select Schedule building components. more category options are available. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select Spaces. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. for Select available fields from.Space Fill is the active view. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. In the next exercise. For Name. enter Space Airflow Schedule.rvt. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. select New Construction. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. For Phase. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements.12 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Click OK. In this exercise. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. select Spaces. click Training Files.

Select Formula. For Formula. select Airflow Delta. Select Ascending. select Level. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. In the Calculated Value dialog. and then click Conditional Format. In the Fields dialog. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Formula. Header. In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Then by. For Type. select Number. select Level. and then select Hidden field. and Blank line. select HVAC. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. For Discipline. ■ Click Calculated Value. select Air Flow. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. enter Airflow Delta. and then click .■ Under Available fields. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. enter . and click OK. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. Click OK. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select Not Between. For Fields. click (Browse).

Under Conditions to Use. click the color swatch. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. In the Color dialog. select red. and click OK. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. ■ The schedule displays. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In later exercises. 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. verify that Show is highlighted. right-click to access schedule properties. a view opens that contains the selected space.■ ■ ■ For Value. In this exercise. Click OK twice. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. For Background Color. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. In the next lesson. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow.

78 .

you size ductwork and validate your air system design. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. As you place the air terminals. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. and work with the airflow schedule. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. you will create supply air systems.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. After completing the air systems lesson. After system creation. 79 . you modify air terminal parameters. Then. In this lesson.

80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the ceiling view. and scroll to space 223. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.rvt. click Training Files.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . the space crossing lines display. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule.

select the diffuser. click Place on Face. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. If the host element is modified or moved. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. and press Enter. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. verify that Constrain is cleared. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. type 12.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . as shown. and then press Esc to end the command. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . 13 On the Options Bar. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. enter 425 CFM.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. 9 On the Placement panel. 17 Move the cursor down. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. which in this case is the ceiling grid. Also.Rectangular Face Round Neck . The schedule updates with the new flow data. the hosted elements are updated as well. for Flow. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and select Supply Diffuser . and press Enter. 15 On the Options Bar. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser.

21 On the Options Bar. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. As you place the return diffusers. and then press Esc. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. clear Leader. 22 In the drawing area.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.rfa. and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. Next. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and click Open. 29 Place 2 diffusers.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Yes. select one of the diffusers. 24 In the Open dialog. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 25 In the drawing area. click Place on Face.

35 In the Instance Properties dialog. as shown. select one of the return diffusers. for Reference. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. under Other. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties.Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. Level. select Strong Reference. 31 In the alert dialog. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. click Yes. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . and click to select the lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

enter 9' 0"2750. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. For the start point. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . for Constraints ➤ Offset. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click the Level 1 line. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. ■ ■ For the end point. Verify that the measured distance is 9'.

verify that Design ➤ HVAC . the space crossing lines display. After creating the logical connection. indicating that it’s the active view. right-click the title.Design is highlighted.rvt. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . click Training Files. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.HVAC Plan . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. and click View ➤ Systems. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. You then create the logical connection between the system components.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed.Press Esc. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. When you highlight a space. including energy analysis. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. However. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.

10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 15 Click Cancel. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. review the Number of Elements. 6 Keep the System Browser open. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. As you add diffusers to systems. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and Flow value. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. 12 In the System Browser. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . On the Options Bar. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. System Name. Connect Into. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. the number of elements is updated. 11 In the drawing area. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply.

and the system connects them. under Identity Data. under Mechanical. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 Click OK. the air terminals are the children. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Rename the system Next. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.17 Using the method learned previously. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 26 Click Finish Editing System. which updates the name in the System Browser. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Mark. for System Name. 25 Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. In this exercise. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. In this exercise. 22 Click OK. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser.

for Solution Type. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . click Training Files. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and display solution 1. the space crossing lines display.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space using the cursor.HVAC Plan. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. which provides various layout tools. Also. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. indicating that it’s the active view. A Generate Layout tab displays. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select the upper left diffuser. select Network. In this case. 4 In the drawing area. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. the Network type provides several solutions.rvt.

9 On the Generate Layout panel. click Settings. Click OK. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main.7 On the Options Bar. For Offset. For Offset. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. enter 3'. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. click Modify.Round. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . For Duct Type. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . enter 9' 10 1/2". 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. Select Branch. enter 9' 10 1/2". as shown. For Flex Duct Type. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. you’ll get an error in a later step.

a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. select a different layout solution. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or offset elevations are incorrect. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork.11 Click Finish Layout. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . as is the elbow itself. For example. or manually modify the duct.

and then click OK. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected.Flow. but not all values are used in this view. and click to select it. for Values Displayed. The first time you press Tab. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. fittings.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. Using a flow-based color scheme. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. for Color Scheme. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. and equipment. You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . If the entire network does not highlight. thus it is not part of the system. a disconnection exists. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. select Duct Color Fill . 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. select By View. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. and click OK. Usually. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. under Graphics. highlight a segment of the main duct. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.

Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. select one of the diffusers in the system. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals. select Duct Color Fill . 20 In the drawing area. for Schemes. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.Airflow. under Mechanical . and click OK.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. for Flow. select the WSHP. select the color scheme legend. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. and then press Esc to clear the selection. and press Enter. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . 26 Click OK. 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme.Velocity.

Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. for Branch Sizing. Click OK.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. Select the upper segment of main duct. and drag it to the right. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. Select Only. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and then click to select it. click Cancel. Select Restrict Height.08 in-wg/100ft. select Friction. select Calculated Size Only. and select 16". Under Constraints. and enter . 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. The ductwork and fittings are updated. highlight a segment of the duct.

32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. Using this tool. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. and pressure loss. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection).Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. pressure. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab.

rvt. click Training Files. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 35 Click Finish. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system.NOTE As you inspect a system. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure.

indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Duct.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Design is highlighted. and select the WSHP. and click to specify the end of the main duct. 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors).Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .

double-click MEP . 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 15 On the ViewCube.3D MEP. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Front. and click Draw Duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. right-click the connector grip. click the corner where the Top. 11 On the Options Bar. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 14 In the Project Browser. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. select 9' 10 1/2". use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. for Offset.

The ductwork is automatically created. 22 Using the same method. 19 In the drawing area. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Also. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. in space 115.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. the color fill indicates the flow value. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct.

Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. 25 Press Esc. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. You can ignore the warning. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems .Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. and click to select it. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run.

and click OK. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. clear Restrict Height. select a segment of the main duct. 40 Using the same method. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.Airflow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . for Flow. and then click OK. under Mechanical . The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. such as a plenum. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. under Constraints.

you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. and a cooling tower located on the roof. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. 109 . In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. Create return and supply piping systems. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. Then. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. additional water source heat pumps from level 1.

click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i.rvt.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. you place mechanical equipment. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.

verify that Wall faces is selected. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.High Efficiency . 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.2-6 Tons . 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. as shown. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.Horizontal . A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number.Left Return . indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down. in corridor 328. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. and select WSHP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 On the Options Bar. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.

as shown. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the dimension. click the top edge of the WSHP. and click to place the dimension. and in the Type Selector. as shown.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 10 Select the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and enter 2'.8 Click the corridor wall face. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed.

19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.14 Click Modify. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. for Offset. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. and click to place it in the mechanical room. Under Mechanical. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . for Water Flow. enter 9'. as shown. select the 2 WSHPs. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. enter 12 GPM. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . including flow and pressure. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.

Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. but without a corresponding system. and click View ➤ Piping.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design is highlighted.Mech 330). Unlike logical connections (systems). and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . analyses cannot be performed. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. where it is easier to review the information. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. click Training Files. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 5 In the System Browser. You can create pipes to connect system components. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . Creating a Piping System | 115 .

all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Notice that on the Options Bar. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. for System Name. and the Edit System tool is not active. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Therefore. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. select the boiler. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. while pressing Ctrl. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .In the System Browser. select the 2 WSHPs. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. 12 In the drawing area. Assigning a system component to an existing system. This display indicates that the system is selected. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. As you assign equipment to systems.

enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.13 Click Finish Editing System. 17 On the Options Bar. You have created the hydronic return system. Creating a Piping System | 117 .) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click Roof . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. 19 In the Project Browser. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system.HVAC Plan . (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. for System Name.Design. and select the cooling tower.

The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. 29 Right-click CHWS.22 In the Select Connector dialog. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and bypasses the cooling tower. indicating the logical connection. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 28 Using the same method. expand the Hydronic Return system category. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Select. and click OK. In cooling mode. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). 23 Close the roof plan view. In heating mode. 25 Select the boiler. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. and click Expand All.

right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. and click Properties. You also manually modify the layout path as required. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. you can view several parameters. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. including the flow rate and size of the component. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. for Water Flow. under Mechanical. and click OK. expand Piping. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 32 In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. enter 18 GPM.

Notice that all components within the Level 3 . 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Mechanical Equipment.rvt. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC plan view range are highlighted. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). you can place the cursor over a system component. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 9 In the Select a System dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. then the Select a System dialog displays. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. select CHWR. 5 In the Filter dialog. and click to select it. and click OK. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). 10 Click OK. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i. When you draw a box to select components. the boiler. press Tab to highlight the system. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. click Check None. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted.Mech 330). 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. A system preview displays in red.HVAC Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.

It does not reference the architecture. For Inset. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. verify that Solutions is selected. duct. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . select Perimeter. enter 1' 6''.11 On the Options Bar. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. click Settings. structural beams. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 13 Click Cancel. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. or architectural components. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components.

Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines.16 Click Finish Layout. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 19 In the drawing area. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. and the flow for the other is 12. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. and press Tab 3 times. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. to display the path with thinner lines.

The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. and access its instance properties. 23 Under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 24 Press Esc. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). 22 Select the boiler. and click OK.

31 Close the Level 1 plan view. double-click Level 1 . 32 Click Finish Editing System.Design ➤ Floor Plans. On the Options Bar. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). which propagates flow throughout the system. Logically. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. click Edit System. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. you physically close the CHWR loop. the Number of Elements is now 8.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.Design. 27 On the System Tools panel. Next. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs.HVAC Plan .

Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. as shown. and click Cancel. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. under Mechanical. access its instance properties. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). 38 Using the same method. 35 Using the drag control. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. select a WSHP. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout.

41 Click OK. For Slope. and then click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5. select CHWS. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. Click Settings. enter 0''/12''. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. For Inset. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 1' 6''.40 In the Select a System dialog. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component.

47 In the drawing area.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . as shown. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 48 While pressing Ctrl.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown.

You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Add piping to close the supply loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. 51 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. select a different layout solution. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). To create the piping system.50 Using the same method. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. double-click 3D HVAC Building.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ 3D Views. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. As you work in the training file. In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. click Training Files.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog.HVAC Plan .Design is highlighted. as shown. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and the return pipes are magenta.

as shown. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 6 Press Delete. select the section of piping. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. Click to specify the reference point. 9 In the 3D view. and press Esc to clear the selection. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .

and the boiler is connected to the return piping. select the boiler. 13 In the plan view. select the return pipe riser. and click OK. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and click Draw Pipe. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. The connections are automatically created. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. and the lower one is secondary.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 11 In the Select Connector dialog. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 12 In the 3D view.

and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 1' . 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 2'. for Offset. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump.In a plan view. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. ■ Move the cursor down. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right.7''. and you select 1 connector. and press Enter. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 .

Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. and click OK. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. select the primary base mounted pump. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 19 In the plan view.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. and select it. and the appropriate fittings are created. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 18 Press Esc twice. as shown. As you place piping runs that are close together. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting.

27 Move the cursor to the right. and click Draw Pipe. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays. and click to draw the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . you select the tee fitting.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. 28 Press Esc. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. click to connect to the pump. 29 If necessary. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click the minus symbol. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting.

32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. 33 Press Esc. enter 4'. select the primary base mounted pump.

zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. as shown. 35 Using the method learned previously.Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 . 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector.

enter 9' 6''. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and click to create the pipe. type 1'. ■ Move the cursor down. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. and press Enter. right-click the bottom control on the tee. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . right-click. You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. Next. you validate the flow through the system. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. and click Element Properties.

48 In the plan view. The flow is being propagated through the piping.50 or 50% of the Flow. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. select the cooling tower. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . view the properties for the secondary pump. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click Element Properties. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. and click OK. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. 43 Press Esc. for Cooling Water Flow. as shown. notice that under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 44 In the 3D view. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. Connect the cooling tower Next. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. right-click. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Click OK. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). the value is 0 GPM.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 40 Click Cancel. 41 Using the same method.

NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system. 49 Press Esc.■ Lower pipe (outlet).

and close the dialog. select the cooling tower. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. the water bypasses the cooling tower. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .50 In the 3D View. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM. and is heated by the boiler. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. Adding Valves In this exercise.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. and select Ball Valve .2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .HVAC Plan . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel.Design is highlighted. The bypass valve is closed by default. 8 Press Esc twice. as shown. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. verify that the Diameter value is 3''. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. 4 On the Options Bar.

13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. parallel to the previously placed valve. 14 Using the same method. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve . Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

20 Select the bypass valve. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. 19 Using the same method. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and click OK. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. In heating mode.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. right-click. verify that Flow is 0 GPM.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. and click Element Properties. and select Ball Valve . Adding Valves | 145 . and select Ball Valve . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. (This valve allows the water to flow through it.

146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Initially. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .22 Using the method you just learned. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC Plan . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i.Design is highlighted. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. click Training Files. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM.

for Schemes. This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. click Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection.Flow. and click OK. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Sizing Pipe | 147 . select Pipe Color Fill . This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend.

13 Press Esc. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. for Branch Sizing. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. select Friction.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. Select And. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. enter 5 FPS. Click OK. select Larger of Connector and Calculated.25 FT/100ft. and for Velocity. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). and click to select the branch. Under Constraints. and enter 2. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used.

select a different layout solution. Using the System Inspector. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. click Training Files.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.Design ➤ 3D Views. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. or offset elevations are incorrect. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Inspecting the System | 149 . Either relocate the system components. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. pressure. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Inspecting the System In this exercise. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

as required. An inspection flag reports the section number. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. flow. and pressure information including pressure loss. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. This information helps you modify the system design.

and the Pressure Loss is 1. select 90° F. Checking Piping Systems | 151 .88 psi. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7. targeting those systems that need attention. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 10 Click Finish. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. inspect Section 6 again. and click OK. you need to validate them. the Static Pressure is 7. and to size pipe.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. for Fluid Temperature. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 9 Using the same method. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. as shown. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. In this exercise.67 psi.89 psi. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties.

Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. right-click the Systems titlebar. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. As you learned when placing components. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. After you have assigned all components to systems. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. thus assigning the components to a system. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. 9 Right-click CHWS. 7 In the System Browser.HVAC Plan .rvt. You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. click Training Files. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. After you assign components to a system.HVAC Plan . 4 In the System Browser. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. and click View. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser.Design. For example. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). and for pipe sizing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.Design ➤ Floor Plans. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. If you place components without assigning them to a system. In the System Browser. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. 6 In the Project Browser. the pipe is associated with that system. and click Show to view all of the system components. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Warnings display.Design. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and double-click Level 3 . NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. double-click Level 1 .

You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.HVAC Plan . otherwise.Design floor plan. right-click Hydronic Return. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and select Level 3 . and confirm unassigned system components. 12 In the System Browser. 13 Right-click CHWR. click Close.TIP If you have multiple views open. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 14 Using the methods that you learned. 10 Using the same methods.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system. 155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial.

156 .

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . Define required lighting. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson.

Select Correction Factor. expand Wiring . select 75. For Temperature. click (Open). 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. distribution systems. ■ ■ For Factor. For Temperature Rating. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. ■ Click New Correction Factor.rvt.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. select Copper.04. select Copper. select 90. Click OK. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. wiring. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. As you place components and create circuits. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . ■ ■ For Material.Wire Sizes. speeding up the design phase. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select Wiring Types. You also add a wiring type. For Material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. enter 1. enter THHN. In this exercise you review electrical settings.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

16 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK three times. for Custom Colors. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . Click Background Color. select Red.■ ■ For Value. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red.

you place lighting fixtures in the drawing.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. Then. First. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. as you place lighting fixtures. 167 . Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create power loads. Create a panel schedule. power circuits. Use the System Browser to check your design. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits.

rvt. select the color legend.Lighting Color Fill view is open. You can create additional color schemes. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. select Average Estimated Illumination. By using orange as the color for this range. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. select Orange. click Training Files. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. Under Scheme Definition. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Basic Colors. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. click (Open).Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. for the Spaces Category.00 fc. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes.00 fc. In the Color dialog. select the color for Less Than 20.

The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/.7 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 13 Click the Level 2 .5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. zoom to space Library 219. 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format).Lighting Ceiling plan. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. 8 In the Project Browser.5 fc range is satisfied. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. The red field will clear once the +/.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.

26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. 25 On the Options Bar. 18 Click to place the fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. select Multiple. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 23 Click OK. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.

29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 Press ESC to end the command. 28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. select the 3 fixtures. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid.

32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically. Note the value in red for the space Library 219.

35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 36 In the Filter dialog. and for Category. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 . 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . click Check None. Click OK.277V. select Lighting Fixtures.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view. Note the changes for the space Library 219.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown. select Multiple Alignment.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. The lighting delta is satisfied. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 41 On the Options Bar. 42 In the drawing area.

The fixture aligns. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures.43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. In the next exercise.45 Press ESC to end the command. you modify the light fixture IES files. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures.

Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Plan. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Lighting Color Fill plan. scroll to view space space Library 219. 2 Tile the views as shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 .Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser.

click the value for Light Loss Factor. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. enter .00 VA. click the value for Initial Color. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. enter . for Color Preset. Under Identity Data.ies and click Open.85. In the Select File dialog. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. for Type Mark. for Apparent Load. select Xenon and click OK. click the value for Initial Intensity. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. and click OK. ■ Under Photometrics. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Under Photometrics. for Ballast Loss Factor. Under Electrical. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. enter 162. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. select T5 [HO].■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate.277V and click OK. for Lamp. Under Photometrics. Click OK. select 463T5_S. select Luminous Flux. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .00 lm. specify 15000. ■ Click OK twice.93. Under Photometrics. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ Click Apply. enter F15. In the Name dialog.

12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated. click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 10 In the Filter dialog. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W .277V. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. 15 In space Library 219. Note the lighting delta updates again. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture.Press Delete.

17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again. Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Receptacles | 183 . 2 In the drawing area. junction boxes. Junction Boxes. click (Open).rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Placing Switches. In the next exercise. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and receptacles to your design. you add switches. click Training Files. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project.Press Delete. Placing Switches. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0.

4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor .Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 7 Click to place the switch.277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face.

9 Press ESC to end the command. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Placing Switches. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog.8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad. The element type Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. and Receptacles | 185 . Select Junction Boxes . Junction Boxes. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.

enter JB-1NL. Under Electrical. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. you can enter a space to separate the unit values.Offset. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . note the Number of Poles is 1. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Mark. NOTE When entering values. zoom to space Library 219. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. 21 In the drawing area. for Level 2 .14 Press ESC to end the command.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. Click Edit Type. Click OK twice. enter 9’0”. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 15 Select the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power .

Expand General. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. right-click and click Column Settings. Click OK. Distribution System. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Select Load. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. Placing Switches. 24 For any column. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. and Number of Elements. Space Number. NOTE If necessary. 23 In the System Browser. and Receptacles | 187 . Space Name. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. and Voltage. Expand Electrical. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Select Size. 26 In the System Browser. Junction Boxes.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 31 Close the System Browser. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

38 Select the receptacle. 40 On the Options Bar. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. and Receptacles | 189 .

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 42 Move the cursor down. and enter 12’ and press ENTER.

Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 191 .

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

2 In the drawing area. click (Open). In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. zoom to the space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.equipment. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Adding wiring to a project is optional. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment.rvt. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and work toward the higher voltage. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. click Training Files.

Loads. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 9 On the Options Bar. enter PP-2B. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click OK. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. select 120/208 Wye. select 480/277 Wye. For Panel Name.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . #1 Pole Breakers. for Distribution System. for Max. for Distribution System. 7 Press ESC to end the command. 8 Select the panelboard. enter 20.Surface: 100A. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . 23 In the Filter dialog. For Panel Name. and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. #1 Pole Breakers.Loads. Click OK. enter 20. click Check None. Click OK. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 20 In the drawing area. which is the logical connection between the elements. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. zoom to space Instruction 221. for Max. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter LP-2B. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures.

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 .

28 Press ESC to end the command. 33 Select the switch on the right. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down.

for Hot Conductors. 38 Press ESC to end the command. click (Open). Click OK.Loads. Click OK. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. and for Category. select Wires. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. enter 2. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 44 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create circuits without showing wire. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 41 In the Filter dialog. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. except without wire.

Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. 13 In the System Browser. right-click on the Systems heading. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. Rating.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. expand Power. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Distribution System. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. Voltage. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Expand Electrical. click Training Files. and Voltage Drop are selected. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. and verify that Load. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.

29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 22 With the junction box still selected. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. change the Voltage to 277V. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 30 Close the System Browser. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

44 In the Edit Label dialog. under Identity Data. for Type Mark. click Edit Type. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. click below the first one to place it. Click Yes. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 47 In the drawing area. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. enter FR4. 40 Click OK twice. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. Click OK.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. note the label parameters and click Cancel. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Tags. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 35 Press ESC to end the command. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard.

57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. Click Save. 56 In the Filter dialog. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.rfa. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. For Circuit Number. 52 In the Save As dialog. and for Category. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. Click OK. Deselect Break and for Suffix. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter a comma. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Click OK. select Break. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. click Check None. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. Next you create a switch system. and click Apply. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for File Name. select Lighting Fixture Tags.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. for Switch ID. 9 Select the occupancy sensor.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. click (Open). 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. enter a. Creating a Switch System | 205 . click Training Files. under Electrical Lighting. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for switch ID. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK.Lighting. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. enter b. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties.

Next you create a circuit and size wire. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). click Training Files. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Check None. 4 In the Filter dialog. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. 7 In space Electrical 220. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. and data systems. 2 In the drawing area.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. Circuits are used for power. select the PP-2B panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and for Category.rvt. Creating Power Loads | 207 . 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. lighting. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. click (Open). Click OK. select Electrical Fixtures.

12 Press ESC to deselect the wire. and click Open.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Wiring. 19 Click OK.Loads. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and click Element Properties. and in the drawing area. Click OK.rfa. 13 Select the wire again. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . under Electrical . select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. enter 2. and in the right pane. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. for Hot Conductors. select Long Wire Tick Mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark.

as shown. 22 In space Electrical 220. and click to select the circuit. select the PP-2B panel. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. Creating Power Loads | 209 . 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 28 In the drawing area. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click the connector of the first receptacle.26 Press Delete. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. 29 In space Instruction 221. as shown. in space Instruction 221. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. select panel LP-2B. click Training Files. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.rvt. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Next you balance the loads for your design. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. zoom to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. 3 In the Electrical space.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Open.

Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A .3712 VA. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. 1-#12. 14 Close the warning dialog. Phase B 3636 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. enter 30A. and Phase C . while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Scroll down. B. Click OK. for Rating. 1-#10. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. Under Electrical-Loads. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Rebalance Loads. Notice that the loads on Phase A.3616 VA). and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 6 Click OK. 1-#12. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#10.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted.

you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.rvt. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load.Loads.Loads. under Electrical . enter 25A. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Select PP-2B. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties.15 Select panel PP-2B. click Training Files. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. Click OK. and click OK. for Rating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. 17 Close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. enter 30A. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . and click OK. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. click (Open). 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. under Electrical . for Rating. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit.

7 Select the schedule. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Under Header Text. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 3/32. select Bold and Italic. under Other. expand Sheets (all).NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. for Font. for Appearance.rvt. 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. enter 1/8. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Under Body Text. click Training Files. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text.Panel Schedules. for Font Size. Under Header Text. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 4 Close the report. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. for Font Size. click (Open). 11 Click OK twice. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. 6 In the Project Browser. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. and open E601 . select Berlin Sans FB. click Edit.

each with a load of 180VA. select space Lounge 212. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. press TAB once. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Checking Your Design | 215 . The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. In the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. In the System Browser. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. Expand Unassigned. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. under Warnings. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 17 In the drawing area. 18 Select panel LP-2C. zoom to space Electrical 214. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 15 In the dialog.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 16 Close the details dialog. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select MDP-1. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. for Panel.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. 217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.

218 .

3 In the Type Properties dialog. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click PVC . Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system. In this exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. In this lesson. planning is critical to a successful design.Sanitary. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.rvt. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. 219 . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Properties. and click OK. you create a PVC pipe type.Plumbing Plan . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. click Duplicate. and verify that Level 1 .Design is open. type PVC .Vent. 2 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Name dialog. click Training Files. in addition to loading existing families. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Adding a pipe size.

12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog.PVC .PVC . under Pipe Types.Sch 40 . and click Main. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. 22 Click New Size.0''. click Modify. under Mechanical. 13 In the right panel. 25 For Outside. 24 For Inside Diameter.rfa. 26 Click OK. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. select Sanitary. enter -4' .DWV: Standard. 15 For System Type. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. For Offset. 10 On the Selection panel. select None. enter 10°. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Training Files. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 27 For the new pipe size. for Pipe Connector Tolerance. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. select Plastic. click Pipe Settings. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .Vent is listed. Tap. select Tee. 17 In the left pane. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type.DWV: Standard. for Nominal. enter 1/2''.Sch 40 . Cross. enter 27/32''. select Tee Vent . The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P .DWV. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click OK.Sch 40 . 18 For System Type. Tee. select Sanitary. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. In the Project Browser. 21 In the right pane. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. PVC . select Branch. select Tee Reducing Double Vent .PVC . enter 5/8''. for Material. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 6 Click OK.5 In the Type Properties dialog.

You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create the hot water system. and hot and cold water piping. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Create the cold water system. sanitary piping. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. 221 . vent. add a hot water heater.

expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . NOTE To identify a space name and number. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Plumbing Plan .rvt. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you add 2 toilets. click Training Files.Design is open. as shown. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. and verify that Level 1 . including the men’s room (space Male 107).Design ➤ Floor Plans. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. 1 urinal. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

1 wall-mounted urinal. against the left wall.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls.1. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.Flush Valve . and 3 sinks. in the Type Selector. 5 On the Placement panel. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. under Water Closet . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select Public . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . as shown. 4 On the Element panel.6 gpf.Wall Mounted.

and press Esc.Wall Hung. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector. under Urinal . NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. (Again. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces.7 Click to place another toilet. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .) 8 Press Esc. use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer. above the first in the standard toilet space. select 3/4'' Flush Valve.

12 On the Placement panel. click Place on Face. 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. select 5''x5'' Strainer . Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . In placing the fixture. under Floor Drain . you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas).Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.2'' Drain.

and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. right-click in the System Browser table heading. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. and review the components listed under this system. In this exercise.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.rvt. click Training Files. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. and click View ➤ Piping. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. and a floor drain. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 19 Expand Default Sanitary. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and Default Domestic Cold Water. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . a urinal.

7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. clear Lines (<Overhead>). Only plumbing fixtures are selected. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 . and verify that Level 1 . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan . 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser.Design is open. 6 In the plan view. 8 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

click Finish Editing System. so the Create Sanitary System is available. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 12 On the Edit System panel. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Systems Browser. for System Name. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter Sanitary 107. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. expand Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. If you deselected the drain.

as shown. select one of the components in the system. The base is placed. A preview of the piping layout displays. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select Sanitary 107. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. and click OK. a toilet. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. for example.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 .

The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. 25 On the Options Bar. enter -1' 0''. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 23 For Offset. for Diameter. enter -1' 0''. and for Offset. The default settings are automatically modified. select Branch. 24 In the left pane. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.19 On the Options Bar. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click Solutions. select Intersections. and modify it to meet project requirements. select 4''. and click Settings. You accept this suggested solution. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. enter -4'-0”. for Solution Type. for Slope. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 On Options Bar. 27 Click Modify. for Offset. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. select Main. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. and click OK. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 31 Click Modify. as shown.30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method. Creating a Sanitary System | 233 .

Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. select the fitting and click to reorient it. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. When a fitting is reversed.

and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. as shown. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. adding sinks in the men’s room. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . you continue with the work from the last exercise.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. select 22''x22'' .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. click Training Files.Public. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 5 On the Placement panel.Plumbing Plan . as shown. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). in the Type Selector.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open.Rectangular. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. and verify that Level 1 . under Lavatory . verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 4 On the Element panel.

you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. enter 2' 4''. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. For example. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . TIP When entering dimensions. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. 8 Select the sink. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. select Multiple.

select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. and press Enter to create the third sink. 16 On the Edit System panel.■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 Click the 3 sinks. click Finish Editing System. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. 12 In the drawing area. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. click Add To System. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Press Esc. 11 In the System Browser. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen.

Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. 22 In the plan view. 20 Select the fitting. with the tee fitting selected.In the System Browser. 19 In the 3D view. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector).Design ➤ 3D Views. and click Draw Pipe. and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . 21 Select the tee. as shown. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. double-click 3D Plumbing. use the ViewCube to orient the view.

When you press the Spacebar.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. for Offset. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. enter 1/8'' / 12''. and click Apply.6''. 26 On the Options Bar. and click to draw the pipe. press Spacebar. In this example. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 27 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. enter 2' .

31 Click Modify. 30 In the 3D view.3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. move the cursor over the stub pipe.DWV. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting.Sch 40 .PVC . 32 Select the double wye fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. under Wye 45 Deg Double . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard.

38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. and click Draw Pipe. 37 Select the fitting. on the Options Bar. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. right-click the right connector. double-click the section head to open the section view. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. for Offset. you add pipe segments to the double wye. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''.33 With the fitting selected. In the next steps. enter 1'. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 36 In the section view. 34 Press Esc. and press Enter.

and click to place the pipe. 40 Click Modify. as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 .Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. 42 Click Modify. 41 Using the same method.

44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. 49 Using the same method. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and click Draw Pipe. press Spacebar. 46 In the section view. 47 Move the cursor down. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''. and press Esc. right-click the bottom connector. 48 Click Modify.

52 In the plan view. 56 Using the same method. select the P-Trap on the left. select Standard. 54 Click Modify. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .Sch 40 . place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. 55 In the 3D view. 51 In the Type Selector. under Trap P . 53 Using the same method.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink.PVC . You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping.DWV. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. enter 6''. and press Enter. In the plan view. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify. and click Draw Pipe.. select the left P-Trap. Click in the plan view. Select the double wye pipe on the left. 58 Using the same method. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . right-click the left connector on the P-Trap.

Press Esc. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. while pressing Ctrl. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. as shown. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. select PVC Sanitary. under Pipe Types.■ In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. click Finish to select the recommended solution. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel.

65 Close the file with or without saving it. In the left pane of the Open dialog.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 62 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. click Finish. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 63 On the Slope Editor panel. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. adjusting the sanitary stack. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.rvt. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. and verify the slope.

and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. right-click the top connector.PVC . and click to draw the pipe. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.Design.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify.Overall. select the elbow fitting on the right. 5 Select the tee. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. 3 In the Section view. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 9 In the Type Selector.Floor level line. 10 In the 3D view. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 7 On the Selection panel.Design. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and click Draw Pipe.DWV. select the vertical stack.Sch 40 .Plumbing Plan . as shown. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 .

11 Click Modify. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. as shown.Sch 40 . select Standard. under Plug . 12 Select the fitting.PVC . enter 1'-0”. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. 13 Click the rotate control once. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 17 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. for Offset. 18 In the plan view.DWV. 15 Press Esc. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

Plumbing Plan . Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. click Training Files. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.19 Click Modify. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Design ➤ Floor Plans. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 9 In the left pane. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. click Check None. select Branch. select Pipe Types: Water. and click Main. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. for System Type. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type.) 10 Click OK. select Plumbing Fixtures. verify that the value is 9' 0''. for System Type.Overall. double-click 3D Plumbing . and click OK. enter 9' 3''. select Domestic Hot Water. select Branch. select Domestic Hot Water. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. if necessary. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 4 In the right pane. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. expand Unassigned. 6 In the left pane. 7 In the left pane. For Offset. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. 15 In the plan view.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . select Domestic Cold Water. and for System Type. and sinks. For Offset. 17 In the Filter dialog.Design ➤ 3D Views. minimize the Sanitary system. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. draw a selection box to select the toilets. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. select Pipe Types: Water. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the System Browser. urinal. select Main. under Design ➤ Plumbing .

click Finish Editing System. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. For Flow Conversion Method. Notice that the water main displays in blue. In the System Browser. indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. click Edit System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. enter DCW 107. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 21 On the Edit System panel. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . 19 On the System Tools panel. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system.

click to the left of the urinal. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. right-click the top DCW connector. 30 In the plan view. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and click to place the pipe. select Water. and press Enter. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 35 In the Type Selector. 33 Click Modify. 37 On the Options Bar. select the sink above the urinal. as shown. select 3/4''. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. For Offset. and click the connector. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 36 Move the cursor to the left. enter 10'. as shown. and press Enter.2 7/8''. 28 In the Type Selector. for Offset. enter 4'0”. 31 On the Options Bar. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . For Slope.25 Using the same method. for Offset. and click Draw Pipe. 32 Move the cursor to the right. connect the second toilet. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 34 In the plan view. enter 7''. under Pipe Types. enter 3' . enter 0”/12”.

Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 41 Select the top sink. and click to connect to the main cold water line. 40 Click Modify. and click OK. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In.39 Move the cursor to the left.

you create the hot water system. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .44 Using the same method. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.

6 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Design is open. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . while pressing Ctrl. 5 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.rvt. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Overall. 2 In the Project Browser. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. select the 3 sinks. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.Plumbing Plan . expand the Unassigned folder. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . click Training Files. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.

Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. When designing systems. Default Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Default Domestic Cold Water. 13 In the plan view. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Edit System. and click OK. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. in the Unassigned folder. verify that DCW 107 is selected. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. as shown. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first. 15 In the System Browser. 14 Click Modify. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. under Water Heater .6 Gallon. 10 In the System Browser. select 0. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater.Tankless. you edit the system to add equipment. In later steps. for System Name. enter Domestic Hot Water 107.

Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 22 In the Type Selector. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . Offset: 4' 6''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and select Draw Pipe. right-click the middle left connector. click Finish Editing System. 19 Select the water heater. select the water heater. 24 Move the cursor up.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Slope: 0''/12''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. enter 10’. for Offset. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and on the Edit System panel. as shown. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. 23 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. enter 1' 6''. and press Enter. 27 Click Modify. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. and click the water main line. 26 Move the cursor to the right.

35 On the Options Bar. 38 Move the cursor to the right. select 4'-6''. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. 30 On the System Tools panel. 36 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. enter 1''. enter 1' 6''. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish Editing System. select a sink. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. and in the System Selector. 37 On the Options Bar. select Domestic Hot Water 107. for Offset. as shown. 33 On the Edit System panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. and for Offset. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). enter 9' 0''. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. for Diameter. and click Draw Pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. click Edit System.

41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. and press Enter. and click just above the bottom sink.39 Move the cursor down. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . 42 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar. for Offset. enter 1’.

and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal).43 In the 3D view. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

and click Duplicate. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. In this tutorial. 267 . Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. If the tutorial training files are not present. However. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. You create a new pipe type. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. After finishing each exercise. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. In this lesson. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model.rvt. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. go to http://www. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Right-click Standard. you can choose to save your work.autodesk.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. structural beams. for Material. For Offset. duct. 9 Click OK. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. select Main. select Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane. For System Type. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. In this exercise. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. Next. or architectural components. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. select Fire Protection Wet. select Carbon Steel. In the next exercise. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you create project parameters and work with schedules. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. However. For Offset. under Mechanical. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). and enter Fire Protection Wet. For Pipe Type. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. and then click OK. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. and click Properties. For Pipe Type. verify that 9' 0" is selected.

indicating that it’s the active view. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . select space Instruction 221 as shown. and click Element Properties. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Name. right-click. the space crossing lines display. In the left pane of the Open dialog. When you highlight a space using the cursor. select the upper half of the building.Design is highlighted. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Under Categories. 6 In the drawing area. and then click OK. select Fire Protection. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. for Sprinkler Zone. click Training Files. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. click Add. enter Sprinkler Zone. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i. under Fire Protection. 8 Using a crossing window. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .

and click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter Zone 2. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. to which you add various parameters. select Zone 1. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then access instance properties. and then click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Sprinkler Zone.rvt. you create schedules for sprinkler design. including a calculated value parameter. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. under Fire Protection. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. 10 In the Filter dialog. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. click Training Files.

Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. enter 15. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the new header. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 6 Using the same method. Click OK. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. For Name. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 7 Click OK. and click Field Format. double-click on each column separator. select Feet and fractional inches. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select Fire Protection. In the Maximum Spacing column. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. enter Protection Area Construction Type. select Maximum Spacing. Click OK. click Add Parameter. select Length. select Spaces. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. enter Maximum Spacing. For Type of Parameter. 10 In the Format dialog. Select Schedule keys. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Rounding. For Group parameter under. click the Formatting tab. 11 Click OK twice. For Key name. For Units. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . The schedule displays. Obstructed-Combustible. select To the nearest 1'. 9 On the Formatting tab.Design is highlighted. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection.Fire Protection Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. and on the ribbon. for Name. enter Light. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 .

select Spaces. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. 16 Using the same method. and press Enter. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. enter 130. under Available fields. Click OK. Unobstructed Ordinary. For Name. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. enter Sprinkler Schedule. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category.

select Area. select Sprinkler Zone. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. For Discipline. select Fixed. select 0 decimal place. click . select Minimum Sprinklers. 19 Click the Formatting tab. click Edit. 22 Click OK twice. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. select Common. enter Minimum Sprinklers. Enter the formula operator / after Area. Click OK. for Sorting/Grouping. For Formula. and click Field Format. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click View Properties. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. For Type. and click OK. under Other. For Units. For Then by. In the Fields dialog. for Sort by. For Rounding. select Level. select Number. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. 20 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . Select Header and Blank line.

select Grand totals. For Fields. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Filter. select Number. select Sprinkler Zone. 26 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. right-click the schedule.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. At the bottom of the dialog. Under Field formatting. ■ In the Format dialog. for Filter by. click Edit. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Level. select Hidden field. select Level equals Level 2. and then click Field Format. and select Totals only. For Fields. and then select Hidden field. 27 In the drawing area. verify that Use default settings is selected. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Then by (second instance). 30 Click OK twice.

and select Totals only. for Fields. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 .The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. Under Field formatting. under Other. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. select Sprinklers. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. select Calculate totals. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. and Count. For Category. select Embedded Schedule. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. select Count. delete the word Maximum. click Edit. On the Formatting tab. double-click Type. for Available fields. System Name. select Grand totals. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and click View Properties.

for Protection Area Construction Type. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and the spacing parameter values are evident. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. select Light. Unobstructed. select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. 50 Access the instance properties. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. As a result. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. under Identity Data. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click FP . select Ordinary. 43 Click Cancel. 48 In the floor plan.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. 44 In the schedule. 52 Click OK. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 41 In the plan view. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. for Protection Area Construction Type. under Identity Data. but their values are not determined. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. and click OK. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool.Fire Protection Plan Design. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select Ordinary. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space 221 Instruction. 46 With the space still selected. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .53 Close the file with or without saving it.

278 .

go to http://www.autodesk.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. After finishing each exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. If the tutorial training files are not present. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. methodology. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. you can choose to save your work. At the end of this tutorial. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. As you place the sprinklers. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you will understand the process. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. By following the recommended workflow. click Training Files.rvt. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. However. As you create the system. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. 279 . it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. and double-click Level 2 .

When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. while pressing Ctrl. select the sprinklers that you placed. 10 Press Esc twice. and click to place 3 sprinklers. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 9 In space Instruction 202.Pendent . Adding Sprinklers | 281 . 11 In the drawing area.

13 On the Options Bar. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. Next. Also. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. and then press Esc. as shown. and that Copy and Multiple are selected.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. you place non-hosted sprinklers. verify that Constrain is cleared. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. enter 14' 6". click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 19 In the floor plan. open Design ➤ FP . click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. and click Element Properties. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. enter 10' 6". it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 25 Click OK. 29 Press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. and 200C). Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 23 Right-click the sprinkler. and press Enter. for Offset. Next. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. enter 11. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you adjust the offset.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. Because the sprinkler is not hosted. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. Notice that the schedule updates. move the cursor to the right. This number is determined in the schedule.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building.Fire Protection Plan . 17 In the Project Browser.FP_Ceiling view. under Constraints. specify a vertical offset. For Number. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 200B. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 18 Type WT.

physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . and then creating the logical connection between these system components. indicating that it’s the active view.30 Close the file with or without saving it. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. In this exercise. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. and with piping (physical connection). However.Fire Protection Plan . 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . After creating the logical connection. 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. In the next exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). Unlike logical connections (systems). Creating a Piping System In this exercise.rvt. A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

As you assign sprinklers to systems. In the System Browser.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. as shown. click View ➤ Systems. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. within the Piping Systems folder. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Piping System | 285 . named Fire Protection Wet. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system.

Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. click Settings. indicating the logical connection. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. place the cursor over a sprinkler. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. verify that 9' 0" is specified. press Tab. enter FP Wet_Zone2. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system.Wet is selected. for System Name. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. system equipment. In the left pane. Next. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. For Offset. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. 11 With the system still selected. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. verify that Main is selected. 15 In the drawing area. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 14 Click Finish Editing System. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. 12 On the Options Bar. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. and on the Options Bar. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. For Pipe Type. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and a piping layout preview displays. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. providing system editing tools. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . select an initial piping layout. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. and select the system. The Edit Piping System panel displays. 13 In the System Browser. select Branch. and click Select. 19 Click OK. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1.

click Place Base. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . and green represents branch lines). enter -12' 0". for Diameter. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. click Solutions. 23 For Offset. and select solution 5. In general. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout.20 On the Generate Layout panel. 22 On the Options Bar. select 2". 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. as shown. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. When the layout is finished. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction.

First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 29 Click Finish Layout. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. On the Generate Layout panel.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. A (parallel movement control) displays. click Modify. as shown.

select a different layout solution. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing. the Connect Into tool. or that offset elevations are incorrect. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 32 If necessary. Next. and various manual pipe creation tools. Either relocate the system components. or manually modify the pipe. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . and then you create piping to physically connect them.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.

Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. indicating that it’s the active view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and select the elbow fitting as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. 2 Zoom in. 3 If necessary.Fire Protection Plan .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

7 On the Edit Piping System panel. and select solution 5. 9 On the Edit System panel. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 8 In the corridor. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. for Solution Type. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). verify that Solutions is selected.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. air terminals. you can select the pipe or duct. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 12 On the Options Bar. click Add To System. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). 14 Close the System Browser. verify that Network is selected. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. radiators. or a system component to display system tools. click Finish Editing System. 5 In the drawing area. and so on) are logically connected by a system. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and pipe or duct is created. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. 18 Click Finish Editing System. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. mechanical equipment.

draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 28 In the drawing area. 21 In the Piping Plan. and then press Esc.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. for Offset. select 9'.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the sprinkler. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . right-click. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. and then tile the views. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 23 View the result in the 3D view. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Draw Pipe. 24 In the Piping Plan. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 29 Using the same method.

Because the whole system highlights.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 31 In the plan view. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Fire Protection Plan . select 1/4" = 1'-0". indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. double-click on the section head to open the section view. for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar.Design is highlighted. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. ■ 6 Press Esc.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. click Training Files.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select 4".21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. for Diameter.

as shown. 25 On the Options Bar. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. 23 Close the 3D view. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . and maximize the floor plan. The pipe diameter is modified. 26 Using the same method.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. and then tag the piping as shown. select 1 1/4". 24 In the drawing area.

In this exercise. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. You added tags to pipes. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. For additional practice. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters.

and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. 305 . add annotations and dimensions. create details. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial.

306 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. dependent views. right-click Copy of Level 1. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. and click Properties. 307 . and click Rename. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. If the view included detail graphics. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. right-click Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. and apply a view template. click Training Files.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. and view references. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. matchlines. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click OK. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design ➤ Floor Plans.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog.

right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 10 In the drawing area. more focused. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 9 Click OK. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation.rvt. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. click Training Files. and click Apply Default View Template. create dependent views for areas B and C. and then press Esc. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. as shown. 6 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Rename. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. views and put them on the sheet. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Using the same method. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template.

select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click the current value. for Target view. For Line Weight. 19 In the drawing area. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. select black. 20 Select the upper view reference and. on the Options Bar. In the Color dialog. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. Click OK. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and then press Esc. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 21 Using the same method. select 11. and click OK. select Double Dash 5/8". For Line Pattern. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color./ ---). 14 Click Finish Matchline. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. 13 Press Esc twice. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. as shown. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. 27 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 25 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and zoom to each of the view references.

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. For Default View Template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. enter Plumbing Isometric .rvt. Under Graphics.Domestic Water. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . select Documentation. right-click 3D Plumbing. 2 Zoom in. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. click Training Files. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Apply Default View Template. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. right-click Plumbing Isometric . for View Name. 6 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. The section crop lines no longer display. and click to select it. and select the section box. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. select Plumbing Isometric. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Properties.Domestic Water. select Plumbing. 4 In the Project Browser. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. for View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping.

312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . press Tab 3 times.9 Right-click. Click Apply. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". 12 Using the same method. select 3. and click to select it. and then click OK. The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select Dash. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. For Pattern. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater.

and click to select it. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. 14 Right-click. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown).

highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. On the View Control Bar. 18 Using methods learned previously.15 Press Esc. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. and click to select it. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. In the drawing area. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric .Domestic Water view with detailing. press Tab 3 times. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Right-click. click Reveal Hidden Elements.

and then place the callout view on a sheet. as shown. In the Format dialog. For Slope. Creating Callout Views | 315 . click on the Format value. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 26 Close the file with or without saving it.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. and click to place the spot slope annotation. 21 Click OK twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. 25 Press Esc twice. When the view is associated with a sheet. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. for Rounding. you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 1/8". 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. verify that Common is selected.

5 On the Options Bar. select 1/4"=1'-0''. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. for Scale. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Click OK. double-click M601 . change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. Creating Callout Views | 317 . under Sheets (all). ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. select 5. using the same method. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. 13 In the Project Browser. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. for Line Weight. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. drag it to the sheet.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown.

16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. and click Apply Default View Template. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. For Default View Template. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . for View Name. and select the viewport. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. enter WSHP PART PLAN. right-click the callout view. For Title on Sheet.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. and click Rename. 26 In the Rename View dialog. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . and click Apply View Template.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). under Names. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. and click OK.

duct tags. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. 321 . linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. ■ work with model-based components. symbols. and annotation to create a legend. you learn how to: ■ add text notes.

2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C.rvt. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. as shown. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click Training Files. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.Creating Annotations In this exercise. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. 8 With the text still selected. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall.

verify that Leader is cleared. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a segment of round duct. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. Creating Annotations | 323 . select a supply diffuser. 15 On the Options Bar. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. a return diffuser. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. as shown. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area.

select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag.rfa. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 22 In the Tags dialog. 17 Click Modify. 24 On the Options Bar. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. 21 In the Load Family dialog. clear Leader. for Ducts. under Category. and click Open. If necessary. 20 In the Tags dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.

Creating Annotations | 325 . 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. and then press Esc. 32 In the drawing area. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 26 On the Options Bar. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Leader. 31 On the Options Bar. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical.25 In the drawing area. select Horizontal. and Attached End. as shown. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser.

as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown.

36 Press Esc twice. and click OK. and all elements of that type are affected. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. for Leader Arrowhead. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. lay out. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. and lock lighting fixtures. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 37 In the drawing area. That’s because you changed a type property. Creating Dimensions | 327 . 39 In the Type Properties dialog. select Dot Open 1/16". not simply an instance property. select the last tag placed. 40 Using the method learned previously.

8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. select the dimension line.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. On the Options Bar. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection.rvt. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then select the interior face of the wall. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. click Training Files. 12 Press Esc. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection.

enter 8'. 18 Select the dimension value (7' .3 1/2"). lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. Because the dimensions are locked. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. and press Enter. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. 19 Using the same methods. and notes. 16 Press Esc. and offset them 8' from the wall. Creating a Legend | 329 . you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. linework. click the 3 interior locks on the line. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. annotation symbols. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.13 Using the same method.

click Training Files. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click below the title to place the diffuser. Click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. For Scale. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. For View. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel.8 Neck. ■ 9 In the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . select Floor Plan.rvt. select 1/4" = 1' -0". 10 Using the same method. enter Diffuser Legend.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

11 Press Esc. click next to the top diffuser. 14 In the drawing area. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. Creating a Legend | 331 . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify.

21 Press Esc. 27 While pressing Ctrl. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror.DROP and its text note. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. and then press Esc. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .RISE symbol for the copy start point. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 24 Select the component’s break line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. 26 Press Esc. The selected detail lines are now thin.

38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. Creating a Legend | 333 .30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 33 Click to the left of the left break line. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. enter E. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.MECHANICAL LEGEND.

and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 40 Press Esc. 41 Close the file with or without saving it.39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .

and text. A detail callout that references another view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.113 East elevation view. A drafting view using detail components. indicating that it’s the active view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 335 . you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. detail groups. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.Detailing 15 In this lesson. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

Next. 8 Using the same method. select each of the 2 panelboards. clear Leader.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. and click to place it.113 East on the sheet. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 5 In the drawing area.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. and then modify and align the views. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 4 On the Options Bar. place Power Riser . double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them.

giving the appearance of a single view. select the 113 North view. and click Activate View. and click Deactivate View. right-click. 12 Select the Level 1 line. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.9 Press Esc. for Title on Sheet. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click OK. under Identity Data.

19 Select the Level 1 line. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. right-click. Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you add wiring to the diagram. select the 113 East elevation view. right-click. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 21 Using the drag control. 22 Press Esc. In the next exercise. and click Activate View. as shown. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

verify that Chain is selected.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. expand Lines.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. for Line Weight. click New. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. for Name. and click OK. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. and then click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the New Subcategory dialog. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Electrical Power. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). Under Modify Subcategories. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram.rvt. As you draw. notice that there are no snaps active. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. In the Line Styles dialog. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . 9 Beginning at the transformer. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 2 Close the Project Browser.113 North view. 8 On the Options Bar. select 6. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 .

enter 1/8". 13 On the Options Bar.10 Press Esc. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3). for Offset. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Using the same method. as shown.

you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. TIP When you use the Trim tool. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. so that the result is as shown.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown.

24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. as shown. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. 28 Click above the cap. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.

32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Multiple. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point.31 While pressing Ctrl. 33 On the Options Bar. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.

39 Move the cursor to the right. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5. for Offset. and then press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. You enter exact values for each line length. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. enter 3/32". and press Enter. 40 Press Esc. enter 0 0.36 Press Esc. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line.

You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. and then press Esc. 50 With the group selected. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. click on the length dimension value. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. for Name. and click OK. and press Enter. 46 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. you can ensure that they stay together. 47 In the drawing area. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. enter 0 0. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire.125. Press Esc.25. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. select all 3 lines. Using the same method. expand Groups ➤ Detail. while pressing Ctrl. enter Ground.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.

and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. 52 Select the detail group. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move.51 Using the method learned previously. TP-2B. 54 Select the group. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard.

you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i.rvt. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. 5 Zoom in to view the section. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Right-click the copy. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. and will place it on sheet E01. for Name. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Rename. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 3 In the Rename View dialog. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In later exercises. click Training Files. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. 4 Right-click the ViewCube.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 . and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. and then click the corner where the Top. 7 On the ViewCube. Back. and then press Esc. click Home.6 Select the section box. and Left sides converge.

You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. Under Names. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. right-click. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 3D Views. Walkthroughs. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. and click Apply View Template. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser.

Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Move the cursor down and to the left.14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Typical. label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper). Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. (Right). 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. 19 Complete the text labels. and click to specify the second leader point. as shown. 15 Using the same method. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 .

and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. type VP to open the instance properties for the view. under Extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 23 Click on the crop region. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 24 Access the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. and then click OK. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. 25 Click OK. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. as shown. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select Crop Region Visible. and under Extents.

and click Properties. select the isometric view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).rvt. For Scale. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. Click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select 3" = 1'-0". Place a detail component. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. click Training Files. Drafting Detail Components | 353 .29 In the drawing area. 3 In the Project Browser. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. Use detail lines to create a detail group. right-click the view name. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". as shown. 9 Zoom in to the component. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Sub-Discipline. select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. For View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. Click OK. select Documentation. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 13 In the drawing area. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). as the rectangle start point. click the point at the top of the drain.

P. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 21 In the drawing area. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. and then press Esc.I. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. (Line). 23 In the drawing area. 20 Select 1. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Concrete. 22 Click Modify. select C. for Type. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. and click OK. 18 With the filled region still selected. select the filled region.

30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.28 Click Modify. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. and then click to select them. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. select Multiple. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 34 Press Esc.

(Rectangle). The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw a rectangle on top of the filled region.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. and then press Esc. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. 40 Click Finish Region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. as shown. 45 Using the method learned previously. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line.

49 Click Modify. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. enter Flashing Membrane_F. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. and then click to select them.. as shown. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Name. select the Flashing Membrane group. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. and click OK. draw wide detail lines as shown.D. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. press Tab to highlight the chain. 52 In the Create Group dialog.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Drafting Detail Components | 359 .55 Press Esc. 61 Using the same method. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as shown.

69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select Leader and Free End. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 72 If necessary. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 71 Click Modify. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. as shown.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. and then click OK. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar.62 Press Esc twice. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 64 Press Esc twice. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag.

and click to specify the second leader point. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 80 Press Esc twice. 76 To select the leader start point. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 81 Select the text note. and click to specify the text insertion point. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

84 Using the following image as a guide. click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned.82 Continue annotating the detail. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references.

Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. open P103 . Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. 91 Close the file with or without saving it. 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and click to place it. select the view title.

dwg. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. select Visible. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. you import a CAD detail drawing. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles.rvt. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. For Import units. For A-----NPP. click Training Files. For Colors. Click Open. for Line Weight. For Layers. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. select 3. select Auto-Detect. Click OK. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select Black and White. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. 11 Press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. and then press Esc. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. 12 In the drawing area. select the viewport title. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.Plumbing Part Plans & Details.8 Type ZF. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. open P103 . Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.

366 .